blob: 51e73ee296d1fd374df7d2951a4bd35033cd2d29 [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau79158882009-06-09 11:59:08 +02005 version 1.4
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau6939b552010-01-25 01:54:37 +01007 2010/01/25
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
45
464. Proxies
474.1. Proxy keywords matrix
484.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
49
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100505. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020051
526. HTTP header manipulation
53
547. Using ACLs
557.1. Matching integers
567.2. Matching strings
577.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
587.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
597.5. Available matching criteria
607.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
617.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
627.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
637.6. Pre-defined ACLs
647.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
65
668. Logging
678.1. Log levels
688.2. Log formats
698.2.1. Default log format
708.2.2. TCP log format
718.2.3. HTTP log format
728.3. Advanced logging options
738.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
748.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
758.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
768.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
778.4. Timing events
788.5. Session state at disconnection
798.6. Non-printable characters
808.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
818.8. Capturing HTTP headers
828.9. Examples of logs
83
849. Statistics and monitoring
859.1. CSV format
869.2. Unix Socket commands
87
88
891. Quick reminder about HTTP
90----------------------------
91
92When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
93fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
94on almost anything found in the contents.
95
96However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
97formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
98correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
99
100
1011.1. The HTTP transaction model
102-------------------------------
103
104The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100105to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200106from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
107connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
108will involve a new connection :
109
110 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
111
112In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
113establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
114by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
115length.
116
117Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
118to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
119however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
120response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
121header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
122
123 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
124
125Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
126power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
127but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
128a smaller value. HAProxy currently does not support the HTTP keep-alive mode,
129but knows how to transform it to the close mode.
130
131A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
132keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
133second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
134page :
135
136 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
137
138This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
139latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
140correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
141the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
142server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
143
144Right now, HAProxy only supports the first mode (HTTP close) if it needs to
145process the request. This means that for each request, there will be one TCP
146connection. If keep-alive or pipelining are required, HAProxy will still
147support them, but will only see the first request and the first response of
148each transaction. While this is generally problematic with regards to logs,
149content switching or filtering, it most often causes no problem for persistence
150with cookie insertion.
151
152
1531.2. HTTP request
154-----------------
155
156First, let's consider this HTTP request :
157
158 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100159 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200160 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
161 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
162 3 User-agent: my small browser
163 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
164 5 Accept: image/png
165
166
1671.2.1. The Request line
168-----------------------
169
170Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
171
172 - a METHOD : GET
173 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
174 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
175
176All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
177which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
178followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
179is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
180desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
181the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
182
183The URI itself can have several forms :
184
185 - A "relative URI" :
186
187 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
188
189 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
190 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
191
192 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
193
194 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
195
196 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
197 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
198 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
199 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
200 must accept this form too.
201
202 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
203 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
204 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100205
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200206 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
207 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
208 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
209 other protocols too.
210
211In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
212mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
213on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
214It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
215specific to the language, framework or application in use.
216
217
2181.2.2. The request headers
219--------------------------
220
221The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
222beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
223an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
224Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
225values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
226encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
227the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
228define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
229
230Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
231their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
232"Connection:" header).
233
234The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
235that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
236is one valid form of empty line.
237
238Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
239headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
240about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
241application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
242
243Important note:
244 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
245 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
246 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
247 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
248
249
2501.3. HTTP response
251------------------
252
253An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
254messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
255
256 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100257 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200258 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
259 2 Content-length: 350
260 3 Content-Type: text/html
261
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200262As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
263codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
264response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100265continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
266the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
267following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
268sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
269(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
270correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
271such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
272state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
273over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
274if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
275information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200276
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200277
2781.3.1. The Response line
279------------------------
280
281Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
282
283 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
284 - a status code : 200
285 - a reason : OK
286
287The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200288 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200289 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
290 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
291 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
292 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
293
294Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100295"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200296found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
297messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
298or "Authentication Required".
299
300Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
301
302 Code When / reason
303 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
304 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
305 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
306 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
307 400 for an invalid or too large request
308 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
309 accessing the stats page)
310 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
311 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
312 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
313 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
314 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
315 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
316 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
317 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
318 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
319
320The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3214.2).
322
323
3241.3.2. The response headers
325---------------------------
326
327Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
328the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
329details.
330
331
3322. Configuring HAProxy
333----------------------
334
3352.1. Configuration file format
336------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200337
338HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
339
340 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
341 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
342 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
343 "frontend" and "backend".
344
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
346referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
347delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100348preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100349escaped by doubling them.
350
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200351
3522.2. Time format
353----------------
354
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100355Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100356values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
357otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
358numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
359for every keyword. Supported units are :
360
361 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
362 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
363 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
364 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
365 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
366 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
367
368
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003693. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200370--------------------
371
372Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
373are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
374of them have command-line equivalents.
375
376The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
377
378 * Process management and security
379 - chroot
380 - daemon
381 - gid
382 - group
383 - log
384 - nbproc
385 - pidfile
386 - uid
387 - ulimit-n
388 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200389 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200390 - node
391 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100392
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200393 * Performance tuning
394 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100395 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200396 - noepoll
397 - nokqueue
398 - nopoll
399 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100400 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200401 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200402 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100403 - tune.maxaccept
404 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200405 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100406 - tune.rcvbuf.client
407 - tune.rcvbuf.server
408 - tune.sndbuf.client
409 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100410
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200411 * Debugging
412 - debug
413 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200414
415
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004163.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200417------------------------------------
418
419chroot <jail dir>
420 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
421 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
422 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
423 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
424 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
425 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100426
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200427daemon
428 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
429 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
430 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
431
432gid <number>
433 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
434 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
435 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
436 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200438group <group name>
439 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
440 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100441
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200442log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200443 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
444 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100445 configured with "log global".
446
447 <address> can be one of:
448
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100449 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100450 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
451 port).
452
453 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
454 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
455 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
456 writeable).
457
458 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200459
460 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
461 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
462 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
463
464 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200465 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
466 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
467 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
468 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
469 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
470 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200471
472 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
473
474nbproc <number>
475 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
476 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
477 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
478 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
479 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
480
481pidfile <pidfile>
482 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
483 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
484 starting the process. See also "daemon".
485
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200486stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200487 [level <level>]
488
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200489 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
490 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100491 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200492 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
493
494 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
495 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
496 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
497 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
498 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
499
500 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
501 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
502 counters).
503
504 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
505 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100506
507 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
508 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
509 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
510 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
511 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
512 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
513 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200514
515stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
516 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
517 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100518 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200519
520stats maxconn <connections>
521 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
522 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
523
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200524uid <number>
525 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
526 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
527 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
528 one. See also "gid" and "user".
529
530ulimit-n <number>
531 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
532 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
533 option.
534
535user <user name>
536 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
537 See also "uid" and "group".
538
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200539node <name>
540 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
541
542 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
543 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
544 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
545 traffic.
546
547description <text>
548 Add a text that describes the instance.
549
550 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
551 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
552 "<" and ">" characters.
553
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200554
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005553.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200556-----------------------
557
558maxconn <number>
559 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
560 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
561 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
562 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
563
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100564maxpipes <number>
565 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
566 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
567 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
568 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
569 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
570 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
571
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200572noepoll
573 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
574 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
575 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
576
577nokqueue
578 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
579 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
580 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
581
582nopoll
583 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
584 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100585 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200586 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
587 "nokqueue".
588
589nosepoll
590 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
591 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
592 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
593
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100594nosplice
595 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
596 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
597 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100598 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100599 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
600 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
601 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
602 "option splice-response".
603
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200604spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
605 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
606 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
607 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
608 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
609 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
610
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200611tune.bufsize <number>
612 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
613 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
614 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
615 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
616 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
617 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
618 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
619 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
620
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100621tune.maxaccept <number>
622 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
623 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
624 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100625 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100626 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
627 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100628 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100629 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
630
631tune.maxpollevents <number>
632 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
633 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
634 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
635 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
636 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
637
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200638tune.maxrewrite <number>
639 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
640 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
641 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
642 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
643 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
644 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
645 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
646 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
647 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
648 bufsize.
649
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100650tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
651tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
652 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
653 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
654 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
655 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
656 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
657 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
658 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
659
660tune.sndbuf.client <number>
661tune.sndbuf.server <number>
662 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
663 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
664 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
665 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
666 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
667 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
668 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
669 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
670 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
671 notifying haproxy again.
672
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200673
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006743.3. Debugging
675--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200676
677debug
678 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
679 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
680 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
681 system startup.
682
683quiet
684 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
685 line argument "-q".
686
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200687
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006884. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200689----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100690
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200691Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
692 - defaults <name>
693 - frontend <name>
694 - backend <name>
695 - listen <name>
696
697A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
698its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
699section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100700section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200701
702A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
703connections.
704
705A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
706to forward incoming connections.
707
708A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
709parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
710
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100711All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
712'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
713case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
714
715Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
716logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
717proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
718However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
719name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
720
721Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
722and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100723bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100724protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
725modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
726arbitrary criteria.
727
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100728
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007294.1. Proxy keywords matrix
730--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100731
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200732The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
733limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
734they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
735limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200736listed with [no] can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200737option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200738and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
739with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
740specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100741
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200742
743keyword defaults frontend listen backend
744----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100745acl - X X X
746appsession - - X X
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100747backlog X X X -
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100748balance X - X X
749bind - X X -
750bind-process X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200751block - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100752capture cookie - X X -
753capture request header - X X -
754capture response header - X X -
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100755clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100756contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200757cookie X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +0100758default-server X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100759default_backend X X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200760description - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100761disabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200762dispatch - - X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763enabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200764errorfile X X X X
765errorloc X X X X
766errorloc302 X X X X
767errorloc303 X X X X
768fullconn X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100769grace X X X X
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +0200770hash-type X - X X
Willy Tarreaudbc36f62007-11-30 12:29:11 +0100771http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +0200772id - X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200773log X X X X
774maxconn X X X -
775mode X X X X
Willy Tarreauc7246fc2007-12-02 17:31:20 +0100776monitor fail - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200777monitor-net X X X -
778monitor-uri X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100779[no] option abortonclose X - X X
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +0200780[no] option accept-invalid-
781 http-request X X X -
782[no] option accept-invalid-
783 http-response X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100784[no] option allbackups X - X X
785[no] option checkcache X - X X
786[no] option clitcpka X X X -
787[no] option contstats X X X -
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +0200788[no] option dontlog-normal X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100789[no] option dontlognull X X X -
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +0100790[no] option forceclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200791option forwardfor X X X X
792option httpchk X - X X
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +0100793[no] option http-server-
794 close X X X X
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +0100795[no] option http-use-proxy-
796 header X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100797[no] option httpclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200798option httplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200799[no] option http_proxy X X X X
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +0200800[no] option independant-
801 streams X X X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki213014e2009-09-27 15:50:02 +0200802[no] option log-health- X - X X
803 checks
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +0200804[no] option log-separate-
805 errors X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100806[no] option logasap X X X -
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +0100807option mysql-check X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100808[no] option nolinger X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200809option originalto X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100810[no] option persist X - X X
811[no] option redispatch X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200812option smtpchk X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +0200813[no] option socket-stats X X X -
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100814[no] option splice-auto X X X X
815[no] option splice-request X X X X
816[no] option splice-response X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100817[no] option srvtcpka X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200818option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +0200819[no] option tcp-smart-
820 accept X X X -
Willy Tarreau39bb9be2009-10-17 16:04:09 +0200821[no] option tcp-smart-
822 connect X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200823option tcpka X X X X
824option tcplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100825[no] option transparent X - X X
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +0200826persist rdp-cookie X - X X
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +0100827rate-limit sessions X X X -
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +0200828redirect - X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100829redisp X - X X (deprecated)
830redispatch X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200831reqadd - X X X
832reqallow - X X X
833reqdel - X X X
834reqdeny - X X X
835reqiallow - X X X
836reqidel - X X X
837reqideny - X X X
838reqipass - X X X
839reqirep - X X X
840reqisetbe - X X X
841reqitarpit - X X X
842reqpass - X X X
843reqrep - X X X
844reqsetbe - X X X
845reqtarpit - X X X
846retries X - X X
847rspadd - X X X
848rspdel - X X X
849rspdeny - X X X
850rspidel - X X X
851rspideny - X X X
852rspirep - X X X
853rsprep - X X X
854server - - X X
855source X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100856srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200857stats auth X - X X
858stats enable X - X X
859stats realm X - X X
Willy Tarreaubbd42122007-07-25 07:26:38 +0200860stats refresh X - X X
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200861stats scope X - X X
862stats uri X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzkid9db9272007-10-15 10:05:11 +0200863stats hide-version X - X X
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +0200864tcp-request content accept - X X -
865tcp-request content reject - X X -
866tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +0100867timeout check X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100868timeout client X X X -
869timeout clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
870timeout connect X - X X
871timeout contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +0100872timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +0200873timeout http-request X X X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100874timeout queue X - X X
875timeout server X - X X
876timeout srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau51c9bde2008-01-06 13:40:03 +0100877timeout tarpit X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100878transparent X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200879use_backend - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200880----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
881keyword defaults frontend listen backend
882
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100883
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02008844.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
885---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100886
887This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
888
889
890acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
891 Declare or complete an access list.
892 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
893 no | yes | yes | yes
894 Example:
895 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
896 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
897 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
898
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200899 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100900
901
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100902appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
903 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100904 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
905 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
906 no | no | yes | yes
907 Arguments :
908 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
909 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
910
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100911 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100912 checked in each cookie value.
913
914 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
915 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
916 milliseconds.
917
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200918 request-learn
919 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
920 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
921 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
922 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
923 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
924 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
925
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100926 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
927 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
928 data following this prefix.
929
930 Example :
931 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
932
933 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
934 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
935
936 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
937 2 modes are currently supported :
938 - path-parameters :
939 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
940 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
941 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
942 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
943 - query-string :
944 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
945 query string.
946
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100947 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
948 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
949 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
950 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100951 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
952 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
953 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100954 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
955 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
956
957 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
958
959 Example :
960 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
961
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +0100962 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100963
964
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100965backlog <conns>
966 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
967 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
968 yes | yes | yes | no
969 Arguments :
970 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
971 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
972 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
973
974 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
975 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
976 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
977 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
978 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
979 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
980 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
981 backlog parameter.
982
983 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
984 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
985 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
986
987 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
988
989
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100990balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +0200991balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100992 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
993 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
994 yes | no | yes | yes
995 Arguments :
996 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
997 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
998 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
999 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1000
1001 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1002 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1003 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1004 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001005 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1006 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1007 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1008 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1009 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1010 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1011 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1012 it, so that you don't worry.
1013
1014 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1015 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1016 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1017 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1018 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1019 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1020 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1021 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001022
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001023 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1024 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1025 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1026 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1027 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1028 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1029 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1030 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1031
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001032 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1033 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1034 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1035 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1036 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1037 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1038 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1039 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001040 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001041 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001042 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1043 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1044 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001045
1046 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1047 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1048 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1049 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1050 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1051 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1052 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001053 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1054 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1055 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001056
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001057 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1058 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1059 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1060 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1061 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1062 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1063 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1064 URIs start with a leading "/".
1065
1066 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1067 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1068 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1069 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1070
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001071 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001072 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1073
1074 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1075 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1076 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1077 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1078 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1079 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1080 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1081 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1082 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1083 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1084 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1085 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1086 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1087 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1088 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1089 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1090 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1091 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1092 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1093 be randomly balanced if at all.
1094
1095 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1096 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1097 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1098 server will receive the request.
1099
1100 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1101 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1102 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1103 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1104 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001105 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1106 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1107 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001108
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001109 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1110 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1111 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001112 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001113 algorithm is applied instead.
1114
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001115 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001116 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1117 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1118 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1119
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001120 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1121 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1122 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1123
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001124 rdp-cookie
1125 rdp-cookie(name)
1126 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1127 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1128 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1129 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1130 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1131 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001132 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001133 used instead.
1134
1135 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1136 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1137 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1138 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1139
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001140 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1141 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1142 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1143
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001144 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001145 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1146 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001147
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001148 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001149 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001150
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001151 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1152 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1153 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001154
1155 Examples :
1156 balance roundrobin
1157 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001158 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001159 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1160 balance hdr(host)
1161 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001162
1163 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1164 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1165
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001166 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001167 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1168 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1169 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1170 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1171
1172 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1173 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1174 defaults to 16 kB.
1175
1176 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1177 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1178
1179 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1180 Round Robin.
1181
1182 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1183 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1184 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1185 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1186
1187 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1188
1189 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001190 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001191 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1192 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1193 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001194
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001195 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1196 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001197
1198
1199bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...]
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001200bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] interface <interface>
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001201bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001202bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] transparent
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001203bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] id <id>
1204bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] name <name>
Willy Tarreau53319c92009-11-28 08:21:29 +01001205bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001206 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1207 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1208 no | yes | yes | no
1209 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001210 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1211 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1212 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1213 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1214 special address "0.0.0.0".
1215
1216 <port> is the TCP port number the proxy will listen on. The port is
1217 mandatory. Note that in the case of an IPv6 address, the port
1218 is always the number after the last colon (':').
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001219
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001220 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1221 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1222 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1223 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1224 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1225 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1226 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1227 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1228 privileges.
1229
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001230 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1231 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1232 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1233 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1234 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1235 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1236 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1237 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1238
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001239 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1240 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1241 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1242 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001243
1244 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1245
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001246 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1247 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1248 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001249 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001250 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1251 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1252 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1253 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1254 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001255
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001256 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1257 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1258 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1259 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1260 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1261 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1262 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1263 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1264 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1265 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1266 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1267 with front firewalls which would see an established
1268 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1269
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001270 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1271 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1272 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1273 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1274 in a frontend.
1275
1276 Example :
1277 listen http_proxy
1278 bind :80,:443
1279 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1280
1281 See also : "source".
1282
1283
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001284bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1285 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1286 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1287 yes | yes | yes | yes
1288 Arguments :
1289 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1290 may be used to override a default value.
1291
1292 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1293 option may be combined with other numbers.
1294
1295 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1296 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1297 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1298 missing from all processes.
1299
1300 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1301 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1302 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1303 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1304
1305 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1306 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1307 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1308 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1309 and 'even' instances.
1310
1311 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1312 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1313 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1314 32.
1315
1316 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1317 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1318
1319 Example :
1320 listen app_ip1
1321 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1322 bind_process odd
1323
1324 listen app_ip2
1325 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1326 bind_process even
1327
1328 listen management
1329 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1330 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1331
1332 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1333
1334
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001335block { if | unless } <condition>
1336 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1337 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1338 no | yes | yes | yes
1339
1340 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1341 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001342 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001343 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1344 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1345 "block" statements per instance.
1346
1347 Example:
1348 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1349 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1350 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1351 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1352
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001353 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001354
1355
1356capture cookie <name> len <length>
1357 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1358 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1359 no | yes | yes | no
1360 Arguments :
1361 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1362 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1363 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1364 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1365 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1366
1367 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1368 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1369 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1370 right if it exceeds <length>.
1371
1372 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1373 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1374 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1375 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1376
1377 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1378 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1379 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1380
1381 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1382 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1383 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1384 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001385 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001386 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1387
1388 Example:
1389 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1390
1391 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001392 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001393
1394
1395capture request header <name> len <length>
1396 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1397 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1398 no | yes | yes | no
1399 Arguments :
1400 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001401 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001402 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1403 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1404 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1405
1406 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1407 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1408 it exceeds <length>.
1409
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001410 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001411 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1412 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001413 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1414 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1415 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1416 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001417 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001418 environments to find where the request came from.
1419
1420 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1421 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1422 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1423 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001424
1425 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1426 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1427 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1428 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1429
1430 Example:
1431 capture request header Host len 15
1432 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1433 capture request header Referrer len 15
1434
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001435 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001436 about logging.
1437
1438
1439capture response header <name> len <length>
1440 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1441 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1442 no | yes | yes | no
1443 Arguments :
1444 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001445 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001446 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1447 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1448 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1449
1450 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1451 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1452 it exceeds <length>.
1453
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001454 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001455 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1456 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1457 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001458 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1459 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1460 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1461 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001462
1463 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1464 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1465 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1466 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1467
1468 Example:
1469 capture response header Content-length len 9
1470 capture response header Location len 15
1471
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001472 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001473 about logging.
1474
1475
1476clitimeout <timeout>
1477 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1478 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1479 yes | yes | yes | no
1480 Arguments :
1481 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1482 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1483 as explained at the top of this document.
1484
1485 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1486 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1487 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1488 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1489 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1490 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1491 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1492 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001493 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001494 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1495 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1496
1497 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1498 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1499 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1500 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1501 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1502 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1503
1504 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1505 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1506
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001507 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1508 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001509
1510
1511contimeout <timeout>
1512 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1513 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1514 yes | no | yes | yes
1515 Arguments :
1516 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1517 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1518 as explained at the top of this document.
1519
1520 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001521 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001522 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001523 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1524 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1525 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1526 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1527
1528 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1529 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1530 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1531 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1532 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1533 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1534
1535 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1536 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1537 instead.
1538
1539 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1540 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1541
1542
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001543cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001544 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001545 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1546 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1547 yes | no | yes | yes
1548 Arguments :
1549 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1550 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1551 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1552 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1553 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1554 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1555 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1556 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1557 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1558
1559 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1560 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1561 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1562 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1563 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1564 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1565 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1566 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1567 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1568 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1569 "insert" and "prefix".
1570
1571 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1572 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1573 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1574 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1575 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1576 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1577 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1578 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1579 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1580
1581 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1582 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1583 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1584 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1585 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1586 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1587 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1588 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1589 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1590 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1591 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1592
1593 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1594 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1595 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1596 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1597 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1598 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1599 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1600 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1601 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1602 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1603
1604 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1605 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1606 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1607 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1608 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1609 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1610 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1611 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1612 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1613
1614 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1615 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1616 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1617 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1618 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1619 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1620 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1621 persistence cookie in the cache.
1622 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1623
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001624 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001625 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001626 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1627 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1628 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1629 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1630 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1631 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001632
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001633 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1634 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1635 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1636 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001637
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001638 Examples :
1639 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1640 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1641 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1642
1643 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1644
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001645
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001646default-server [param*]
1647 Change default options for a server in a backend
1648 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1649 yes | no | yes | yes
1650 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001651 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1652 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1653 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1654 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001655
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001656 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001657 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1658
1659 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001660
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001661
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001662default_backend <backend>
1663 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1664 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1665 yes | yes | yes | no
1666 Arguments :
1667 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1668
1669 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1670 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1671 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1672 will catch all undetermined requests.
1673
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001674 Example :
1675
1676 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1677 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1678 default_backend dynamic
1679
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001680 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1681
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001682
1683disabled
1684 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1685 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1686 yes | yes | yes | yes
1687 Arguments : none
1688
1689 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1690 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1691 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1692 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1693 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1694 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1695 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1696
1697 See also : "enabled"
1698
1699
1700enabled
1701 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1702 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1703 yes | yes | yes | yes
1704 Arguments : none
1705
1706 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1707 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1708
1709 See also : "disabled"
1710
1711
1712errorfile <code> <file>
1713 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1714 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1715 yes | yes | yes | yes
1716 Arguments :
1717 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1718 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1719
1720 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001721 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001722 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001723 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1724 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001725
1726 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1727 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1728 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1729
1730 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1731 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1732 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1733 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1734
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001735 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1736 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1737 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1738 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1739 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1740 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1741
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001742 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1743 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1744 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001745 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001746 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1747
1748 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1749
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001750 Example :
1751 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1752 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1753 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1754
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001755
1756errorloc <code> <url>
1757errorloc302 <code> <url>
1758 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1759 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1760 yes | yes | yes | yes
1761 Arguments :
1762 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1763 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1764
1765 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1766 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1767 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1768 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1769 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1770
1771 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1772 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1773 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1774
1775 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1776 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1777 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1778 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1779 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1780 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1781 request.
1782
1783 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1784
1785
1786errorloc303 <code> <url>
1787 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1788 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1789 yes | yes | yes | yes
1790 Arguments :
1791 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1792 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1793
1794 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1795 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1796 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1797 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1798 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1799
1800 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1801 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1802 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1803
1804 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1805 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1806 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1807 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001808 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001809
1810 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1811
1812
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001813force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1814 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1815 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1816 no | yes | yes | yes
1817
1818 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1819 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1820 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1821 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1822 marked down for maintenance operations.
1823
1824 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1825 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1826 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1827 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1828 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1829 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1830 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1831 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1832 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1833
1834 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1835 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1836 is used.
1837
1838 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1839
1840
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001841fullconn <conns>
1842 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1843 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1844 yes | no | yes | yes
1845 Arguments :
1846 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1847 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1848
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001849 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001850 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001851 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001852 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1853 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1854 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1855 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1856 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001857 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001858
1859 Example :
1860 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1861 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1862 # connections.
1863 backend dynamic
1864 fullconn 10000
1865 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1866 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1867
1868 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1869
1870
1871grace <time>
1872 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1873 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001874 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001875 Arguments :
1876 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1877 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1878 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1879
1880 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1881 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001882 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001883 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1884
1885 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1886 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1887 simplify it.
1888
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001889
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001890hash-type <method>
1891 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1892 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1893 yes | no | yes | yes
1894 Arguments :
1895 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1896 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1897 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1898 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1899 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1900 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1901 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1902 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1903 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1904
1905 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1906 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1907 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1908 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1909 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1910 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1911 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1912 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1913 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1914 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1915 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1916 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1917 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1918
1919 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1920
1921 See also : "balance", "server"
1922
1923
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001924http-check disable-on-404
1925 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1926 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001927 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001928 Arguments : none
1929
1930 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1931 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1932 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1933 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1934 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1935 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1936 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1937 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1938 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1939
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001940 See also : "option httpchk"
1941
1942
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01001943http-check send-state
1944 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
1945 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1946 yes | no | yes | yes
1947 Arguments : none
1948
1949 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
1950 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
1951 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
1952 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
1953 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
1954
1955 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
1956 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
1957 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
1958 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
1959 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
1960 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
1961 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
1962 checked in multiple backends.
1963
1964 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
1965 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
1966
1967 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
1968 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
1969 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
1970 one fails.
1971
1972 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
1973 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
1974 connections on all servers of the same backend.
1975
1976 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
1977 server's queue.
1978
1979 Example of a header received by the application server :
1980 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
1981 scur=13/22; qcur=0
1982
1983 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
1984
1985
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01001986id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001987 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
1988 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1989 no | yes | yes | yes
1990 Arguments : none
1991
1992 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
1993 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
1994 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01001995
1996
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001997log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02001998log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001999 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2000 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2001 yes | yes | yes | yes
2002 Arguments :
2003 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2004 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2005 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2006 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2007 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2008 parameter.
2009
2010 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2011 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2012
2013 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2014 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2015 standard syslog port).
2016
2017 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2018 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2019 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2020 appropriately writeable).
2021
2022 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2023
2024 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2025 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2026 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2027
2028 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2029 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2030 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002031 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2032 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2033 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2034 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2035 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002036
2037 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2038
2039 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2040 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2041 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2042
2043 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002044 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2045 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2046 "info".
2047
2048 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2049 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2050 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2051 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2052
2053 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2054 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002055
2056 Example :
2057 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002058 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2059 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002060
2061
2062maxconn <conns>
2063 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2064 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2065 yes | yes | yes | no
2066 Arguments :
2067 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2068 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2069 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2070 closes.
2071
2072 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2073 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2074 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2075 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2076 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2077 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2078 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2079 properly tuned.
2080
2081 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2082 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2083 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2084
2085 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2086
2087
2088mode { tcp|http|health }
2089 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2090 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2091 yes | yes | yes | yes
2092 Arguments :
2093 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2094 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2095 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2096 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2097
2098 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2099 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2100 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2101 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2102 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2103
2104 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2105 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2106 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2107 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2108 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2109 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2110
2111 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2112 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2113 will be refused.
2114
2115 Example :
2116 defaults http_instances
2117 mode http
2118
2119 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2120
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002121
2122monitor fail [if | unless] <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002123 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002124 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2125 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002126 Arguments :
2127 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2128 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002129 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002130 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2131 backend and its backup.
2132
2133 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2134 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2135 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2136 servers in a list of backends.
2137
2138 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2139 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2140 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2141 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2142 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2143 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2144 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002145 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002146
2147 Example:
2148 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002149 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002150 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2151 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2152 monitor-uri /site_alive
2153 monitor fail if site_dead
2154
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002155 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2156
2157
2158monitor-net <source>
2159 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2160 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2161 yes | yes | yes | no
2162 Arguments :
2163 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2164 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2165 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2166 followed by a mask.
2167
2168 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2169 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002170 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002171 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2172
2173 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2174 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2175 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2176 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2177 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2178
2179 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2180 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2181 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2182 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2183 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2184
2185 Example :
2186 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2187 frontend www
2188 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2189
2190 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2191
2192
2193monitor-uri <uri>
2194 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2195 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2196 yes | yes | yes | no
2197 Arguments :
2198 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2199 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2200
2201 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2202 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2203 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2204 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2205 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2206 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2207 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2208 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2209
2210 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2211 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2212 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2213 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2214 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2215 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2216
2217 Example :
2218 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2219 frontend www
2220 mode http
2221 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2222
2223 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2224
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002225
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002226option abortonclose
2227no option abortonclose
2228 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2229 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2230 yes | no | yes | yes
2231 Arguments : none
2232
2233 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2234 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2235 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2236 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002237 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002238 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2239 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2240 encountered while delivering the response.
2241
2242 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2243 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2244 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2245 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2246 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2247 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002248 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002249 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002250 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002251 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2252 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2253 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2254
2255 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2256 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2257 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2258 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2259 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2260 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2261 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2262 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002263 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002264
2265 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2266 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2267
2268 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2269
2270
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002271option accept-invalid-http-request
2272no option accept-invalid-http-request
2273 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2274 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2275 yes | yes | yes | no
2276 Arguments : none
2277
2278 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2279 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2280 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2281 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2282 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2283 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2284 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2285 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2286 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2287
2288 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2289 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2290 been confirmed.
2291
2292 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2293 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2294 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2295 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2296
2297 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2298 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2299
2300 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2301 stats socket.
2302
2303
2304option accept-invalid-http-response
2305no option accept-invalid-http-response
2306 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2307 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2308 yes | no | yes | yes
2309 Arguments : none
2310
2311 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2312 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2313 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2314 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2315 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2316 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2317 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2318 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2319 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2320
2321 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2322 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2323 been confirmed.
2324
2325 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2326 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2327 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2328 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2329
2330 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2331 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2332
2333 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2334 stats socket.
2335
2336
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002337option allbackups
2338no option allbackups
2339 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2340 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2341 yes | no | yes | yes
2342 Arguments : none
2343
2344 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2345 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2346 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2347 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2348 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2349 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2350 order between the backup servers anymore.
2351
2352 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2353 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2354
2355 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2356 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2357
2358
2359option checkcache
2360no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002361 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002362 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2363 yes | no | yes | yes
2364 Arguments : none
2365
2366 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2367 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002368 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002369 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2370 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2371 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2372
2373 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002374 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002375 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002376 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2377 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002378 to the client are :
2379 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002380 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002381 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002382 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2383 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2384 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2385 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2386 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2387 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2388 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2389 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2390 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2391 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2392 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2393
2394 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002395 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002396 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002397 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002398 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2399
2400 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2401 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002402 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002403 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2404
2405 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2406 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2407
2408
2409option clitcpka
2410no option clitcpka
2411 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2412 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2413 yes | yes | yes | no
2414 Arguments : none
2415
2416 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2417 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2418 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2419 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2420
2421 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2422 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2423 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2424 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2425
2426 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2427 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2428 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2429 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2430 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2431
2432 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2433
2434 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2435 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2436 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2437
2438 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2439 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2440
2441 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2442
2443
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002444option contstats
2445 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2446 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2447 yes | yes | yes | no
2448 Arguments : none
2449
2450 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2451 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2452 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2453 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2454 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2455 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2456 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2457
2458
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002459option dontlog-normal
2460no option dontlog-normal
2461 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2462 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2463 yes | yes | yes | no
2464 Arguments : none
2465
2466 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2467 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2468 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2469 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2470 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2471 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2472 logged.
2473
2474 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2475 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2476 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2477
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002478 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002479 logging.
2480
2481
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002482option dontlognull
2483no option dontlognull
2484 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2485 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2486 yes | yes | yes | no
2487 Arguments : none
2488
2489 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2490 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2491 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2492 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2493 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2494 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2495 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2496
2497 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2498 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2499 would not be logged.
2500
2501 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2502 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2503
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002504 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002505
2506
2507option forceclose
2508no option forceclose
2509 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2510 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002511 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002512 Arguments : none
2513
2514 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2515 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2516 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2517 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2518 global session times in the logs.
2519
2520 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002521 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002522 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2523 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2524 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2525 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002526
2527 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2528 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2529
2530 See also : "option httpclose"
2531
2532
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002533option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002534 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2535 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2536 yes | yes | yes | yes
2537 Arguments :
2538 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2539 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002540 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002541 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002542
2543 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2544 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2545 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2546 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2547 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2548 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2549 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002550 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2551 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2552 possible that the client has already brought one.
2553
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002554 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002555 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002556 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2557 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002558 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2559 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002560
2561 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2562 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2563 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2564 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2565 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2566 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2567 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2568
2569 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002570 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2571 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2572 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002573
2574 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2575 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2576 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2577 when using this option.
2578
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002579 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002580 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2581 frontend www
2582 mode http
2583 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2584
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002585 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2586 backend www
2587 mode http
2588 option forwardfor header X-Client
2589
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002590 See also : "option httpclose"
2591
2592
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002593option httpchk
2594option httpchk <uri>
2595option httpchk <method> <uri>
2596option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2597 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2598 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2599 yes | no | yes | yes
2600 Arguments :
2601 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2602 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2603 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2604 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2605 ones.
2606
2607 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2608 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2609 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2610
2611 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2612 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2613 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2614 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2615 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2616
2617 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2618 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2619 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2620 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2621 the lack of any response.
2622
2623 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2624
2625 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2626 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2627 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2628
2629 Examples :
2630 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2631 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2632 backend https_relay
2633 mode tcp
Willy Tarreauebaf21a2008-03-21 20:17:14 +01002634 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002635 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2636
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002637 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2638 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "interval" server options.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002639
2640
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002641option http-server-close
2642no option http-server-close
2643 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2644 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2645 yes | yes | yes | yes
2646 Arguments : none
2647
2648 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2649 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2650 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2651 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2652 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2653 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
2654 of RFC2616.
2655
2656 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2657 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2658 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2659 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002660 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2661 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002662
2663 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2664 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002665 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2666 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2667 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002668
2669 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2670 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2671
2672 See also : "option forceclose" and "option httpclose"
2673
2674
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002675option http-use-proxy-header
2676[no] option http-use-proxy-header
2677 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2678 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2679 yes | yes | yes | no
2680 Arguments : none
2681
2682 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2683 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2684 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2685 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2686 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2687 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2688 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2689
2690 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2691 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2692 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2693 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2694 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2695 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2696 request along its whole life.
2697
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002698 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2699 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2700 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2701 front of an existing proxy.
2702
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002703 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2704
2705 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2706 http-server-close".
2707
2708
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002709option httpclose
2710no option httpclose
2711 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2712 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2713 yes | yes | yes | yes
2714 Arguments : none
2715
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002716 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002717 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2718 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2719 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2720 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2721 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2722 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2723 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2724 be removed.
2725
2726 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002727 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2728 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2729 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2730 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2731 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2732 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002733
2734 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2735 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2736 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002737 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2738 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002739
2740 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2741 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2742
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002743 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002744
2745
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002746option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002747 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2748 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2749 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002750 Arguments :
2751 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2752 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2753 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2754 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2755 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002756
2757 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2758 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2759 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2760 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2761 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2762 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2763 ports.
2764
2765 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2766
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002767 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2768 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2769 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2770 by default.
2771
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002772 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002773
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002774
2775option http_proxy
2776no option http_proxy
2777 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2778 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2779 yes | yes | yes | yes
2780 Arguments : none
2781
2782 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2783 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2784 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2785 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2786 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2787
2788 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2789 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2790 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2791 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2792 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2793 be analyzed.
2794
2795 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2796 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2797
2798 Example :
2799 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2800 backend direct_forward
2801 option httpclose
2802 option http_proxy
2803
2804 See also : "option httpclose"
2805
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002806
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002807option independant-streams
2808no option independant-streams
2809 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2810 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2811 yes | yes | yes | yes
2812 Arguments : none
2813
2814 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2815 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2816 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2817 receive data or not.
2818
2819 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2820 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2821 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2822 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2823 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2824 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2825 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2826 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2827 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2828 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2829 socket buffers.
2830
2831 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2832 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2833 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2834 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2835 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2836
2837 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2838
2839
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002840option log-health-checks
2841no option log-health-checks
2842 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2843 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2844 yes | no | yes | yes
2845 Arguments : none
2846
2847 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2848 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2849 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2850 of additional information is limited.
2851
2852 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2853 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2854
2855 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2856
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002857
2858option log-separate-errors
2859no option log-separate-errors
2860 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2861 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2862 yes | yes | yes | no
2863 Arguments : none
2864
2865 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2866 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2867 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2868 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2869 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2870 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2871 provides very important information.
2872
2873 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2874 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2875 error logs.
2876
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002877 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002878 logging.
2879
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002880
2881option logasap
2882no option logasap
2883 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2884 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2885 yes | yes | yes | no
2886 Arguments : none
2887
2888 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2889 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2890 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2891 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2892 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2893 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2894 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002895 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002896 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2897 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2898
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002899 Examples :
2900 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2901 mode http
2902 option httplog
2903 option logasap
2904 log 192.168.2.200 local3
2905
2906 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
2907 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
2908 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
2909 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
2910
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002911 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002912 logging.
2913
2914
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002915option mysql-check
2916 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
2917 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2918 yes | no | yes | yes
2919 Arguments : none
2920
2921 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
2922 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
2923 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
2924 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
2925 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
2926
2927 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
2928 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
2929 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
2930 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
2931 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
2932 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
2933
2934 See also: "option httpchk"
2935
2936
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002937option nolinger
2938no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002939 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002940 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2941 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01002942 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002943
2944 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
2945 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
2946 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
2947 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
2948 connections.
2949
2950 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
2951 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
2952 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
2953 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
2954 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
2955 this too.
2956
2957 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
2958 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
2959 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
2960
2961 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
2962 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
2963 for servers.
2964
2965 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2966 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2967
2968
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002969option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
2970 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
2971 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2972 yes | yes | yes | yes
2973 Arguments :
2974 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2975 matching <network>
2976 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
2977 header name.
2978
2979 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
2980 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
2981 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
2982 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
2983 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
2984 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
2985 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
2986 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
2987 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2988 possible that the client has already brought one.
2989
2990 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
2991 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
2992 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
2993 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
2994 header and requires different one.
2995
2996 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2997 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2998 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2999 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3000 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3001 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3002 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3003
3004 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3005 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3006 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3007 both are defined.
3008
3009 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3010 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3011 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3012 when using this option.
3013
3014 Examples :
3015 # Original Destination address
3016 frontend www
3017 mode http
3018 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3019
3020 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3021 backend www
3022 mode http
3023 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3024
3025 See also : "option httpclose"
3026
3027
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003028option persist
3029no option persist
3030 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3031 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3032 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003033 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003034
3035 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3036 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3037 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3038 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3039 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3040 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3041 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3042 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3043 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3044 redirected to another valid server.
3045
3046 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3047 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3048
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003049 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003050
3051
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003052option redispatch
3053no option redispatch
3054 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3055 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3056 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003057 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003058
3059 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3060 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3061 be able to access the service anymore.
3062
3063 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3064 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3065
3066 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3067 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3068 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003069
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003070 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3071 "redisp" keywords.
3072
3073 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3074 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3075
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003076 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003077
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003078
3079option smtpchk
3080option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3081 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3082 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3083 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003084 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003085 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3086 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3087 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3088
3089 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3090 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3091 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3092
3093 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3094 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3095 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3096 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3097 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3098 dead server.
3099
3100 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3101 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3102 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3103 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3104
3105 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3106 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3107 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3108 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3109 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3110
3111 Example :
3112 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3113
3114 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3115
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003116
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003117option socket-stats
3118no option socket-stats
3119
3120 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3121 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3122 yes | yes | yes | no
3123
3124 Arguments : none
3125
3126
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003127option splice-auto
3128no option splice-auto
3129 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3130 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3131 yes | yes | yes | yes
3132 Arguments : none
3133
3134 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3135 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3136 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3137 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003138 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003139 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3140 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3141 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3142 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3143
3144 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3145 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3146 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3147 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3148 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3149 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3150 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3151 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3152 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3153 keyword.
3154
3155 Example :
3156 option splice-auto
3157
3158 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3159 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3160
3161 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3162 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3163
3164
3165option splice-request
3166no option splice-request
3167 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3168 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3169 yes | yes | yes | yes
3170 Arguments : none
3171
3172 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3173 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3174 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3175 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3176 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3177 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3178
3179 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3180
3181 Example :
3182 option splice-request
3183
3184 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3185 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3186
3187 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3188 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3189
3190
3191option splice-response
3192no option splice-response
3193 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3194 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3195 yes | yes | yes | yes
3196 Arguments : none
3197
3198 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3199 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3200 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3201 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3202 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3203 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3204
3205 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3206
3207 Example :
3208 option splice-response
3209
3210 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3211 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3212
3213 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3214 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3215
3216
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003217option srvtcpka
3218no option srvtcpka
3219 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3220 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3221 yes | no | yes | yes
3222 Arguments : none
3223
3224 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3225 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3226 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3227 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3228
3229 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3230 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3231 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3232 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3233
3234 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3235 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3236 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3237 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3238 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3239
3240 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3241
3242 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3243 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3244 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3245
3246 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3247 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3248
3249 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3250
3251
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003252option ssl-hello-chk
3253 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3254 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3255 yes | no | yes | yes
3256 Arguments : none
3257
3258 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3259 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3260 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3261 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3262 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3263 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3264 hello message.
3265
3266 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3267 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3268 messages, which is appreciable.
3269
3270 See also: "option httpchk"
3271
3272
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003273option tcp-smart-accept
3274no option tcp-smart-accept
3275 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3276 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3277 yes | yes | yes | no
3278 Arguments : none
3279
3280 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3281 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3282 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3283 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3284 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3285 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3286
3287 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3288 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3289 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3290 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3291
3292 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3293 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3294 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3295 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3296
3297 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3298 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3299 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3300
3301 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3302 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3303 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3304
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003305 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3306
3307
3308option tcp-smart-connect
3309no option tcp-smart-connect
3310 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3311 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3312 yes | no | yes | yes
3313 Arguments : none
3314
3315 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3316 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3317 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3318 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3319 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3320
3321 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3322 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3323 complex.
3324
3325 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3326 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3327 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3328
3329 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3330 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3331
3332 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3333
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003334
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003335option tcpka
3336 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3337 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3338 yes | yes | yes | yes
3339 Arguments : none
3340
3341 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3342 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3343 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3344 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3345
3346 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3347 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3348 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3349 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3350
3351 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3352 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3353 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3354 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3355 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3356
3357 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3358
3359 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3360 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3361 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3362 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3363 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3364 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3365 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3366 backends.
3367
3368 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3369
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003370
3371option tcplog
3372 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3373 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3374 yes | yes | yes | yes
3375 Arguments : none
3376
3377 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3378 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3379 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3380 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3381 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3382 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3383 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3384 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3385
3386 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3387
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003388 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003389
3390
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003391option transparent
3392no option transparent
3393 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3394 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003395 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003396 Arguments : none
3397
3398 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3399 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3400 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3401 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3402 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3403 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3404 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3405 appropriate server.
3406
3407 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3408 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3409
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003410 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3411 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003412
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003413
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003414persist rdp-cookie
3415persist rdp-cookie(name)
3416 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3417 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3418 yes | no | yes | yes
3419 Arguments :
3420 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3421 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3422 no valid reason to change this name.
3423
3424 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3425 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3426 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3427 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3428 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3429 forwarded to this server.
3430
3431 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3432 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3433 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003434 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003435 a single "listen" section.
3436
3437 Example :
3438 listen tse-farm
3439 bind :3389
3440 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3441 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3442 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3443 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3444 persist rdp-cookie
3445 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3446 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3447 balance rdp-cookie
3448 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3449 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3450
3451 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3452
3453
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003454rate-limit sessions <rate>
3455 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3456 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3457 yes | yes | yes | no
3458 Arguments :
3459 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3460 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3461
3462 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3463 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3464 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3465 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3466 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3467 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3468
3469 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3470 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3471 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3472 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3473
3474 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3475 listen smtp
3476 mode tcp
3477 bind :25
3478 rate-limit sessions 10
3479 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3480
3481 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3482 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3483
3484 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3485
3486
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003487redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3488redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003489 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3490 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3491 no | yes | yes | yes
3492
3493 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003494 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003495
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003496 Arguments :
3497 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3498 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3499 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3500 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003501 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3502 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3503 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3504 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003505
3506 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3507 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3508 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3509 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3510 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3511 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3512 location with a GET method.
3513
3514 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3515 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3516
3517 - "drop-query"
3518 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3519 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3520 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3521 with a location-type redirect.
3522
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003523 - "append-slash"
3524 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3525 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3526 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3527 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3528
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003529 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3530 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3531 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3532 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3533 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3534 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3535 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3536
3537 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3538 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3539 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3540 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3541 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3542 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3543 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003544
3545 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3546 acl clear dst_port 80
3547 acl secure dst_port 8080
3548 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003549 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003550 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003551 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3552
3553 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003554 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3555 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3556 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003557 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003558
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003559 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3560 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3561 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3562
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003563 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003564
3565
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003566redisp (deprecated)
3567redispatch (deprecated)
3568 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3569 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3570 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003571 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003572
3573 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3574 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3575 be able to access the service anymore.
3576
3577 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3578 redistribute them to a working server.
3579
3580 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3581 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3582 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003583
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003584 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3585 "option redispatch" instead.
3586
3587 See also : "option redispatch"
3588
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003589
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003590reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003591 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3592 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3593 no | yes | yes | yes
3594 Arguments :
3595 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3596 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003597 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003598
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003599 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3600 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3601
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003602 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3603 the last header of an HTTP request.
3604
3605 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3606 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3607 responses.
3608
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003609 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3610 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3611 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3612
3613 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3614 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003615
3616
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003617reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3618reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003619 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3620 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3621 no | yes | yes | yes
3622 Arguments :
3623 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3624 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3625 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3626 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3627 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3628 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3629 ignores case.
3630
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003631 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3632 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3633
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003634 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3635 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3636 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3637 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003638 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003639
3640 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3641 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3642
3643 Example :
3644 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3645 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3646 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3647
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003648 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3649 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003650
3651
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003652reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3653reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003654 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3655 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3656 no | yes | yes | yes
3657 Arguments :
3658 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3659 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3660 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3661 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3662 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3663 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3664
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003665 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3666 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3667
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003668 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3669 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3670 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3671 next servers.
3672
3673 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3674 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3675 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3676
3677 Example :
3678 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3679 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3680 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3681
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003682 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3683 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003684
3685
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003686reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3687reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003688 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3689 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3690 no | yes | yes | yes
3691 Arguments :
3692 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3693 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3694 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3695 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3696 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3697 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3698 case.
3699
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003700 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3701 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3702
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003703 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3704 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3705 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3706 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003707 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003708
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003709 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003710 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003711 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003712
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003713 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3714 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3715
3716 Example :
3717 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3718 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3719 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3720
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003721 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3722 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003723
3724
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003725reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3726reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003727 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3728 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3729 no | yes | yes | yes
3730 Arguments :
3731 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3732 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3733 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3734 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3735 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3736 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3737 case.
3738
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003739 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3740 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3741
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003742 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3743 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3744 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3745 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3746
3747 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3748 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3749
3750 Example :
3751 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3752 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3753 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3754 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3755
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003756 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3757 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003758
3759
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003760reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3761reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003762 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3763 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3764 no | yes | yes | yes
3765 Arguments :
3766 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3767 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3768 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3769 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3770 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3771 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3772
3773 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3774 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3775 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3776 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003777 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003778
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003779 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3780 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3781
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003782 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3783 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3784 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3785
3786 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3787 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3788 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3789 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3790 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3791
3792 Example :
3793 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3794 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3795 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3796 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3797
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003798 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3799 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003800
3801
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003802reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3803reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003804 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3805 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3806 no | yes | yes | yes
3807 Arguments :
3808 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3809 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3810 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3811 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3812 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3813 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3814 ignores case.
3815
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003816 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3817 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3818
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003819 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3820 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003821 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3822 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3823 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003824 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3825 not set.
3826
3827 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3828 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3829 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3830 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3831 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3832
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003833 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003834 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3835 # block all others.
3836 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3837 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3838
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003839 # block bad guys
3840 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3841 reqitarpit . if badguys
3842
3843 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3844 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003845
3846
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003847retries <value>
3848 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3849 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3850 yes | no | yes | yes
3851 Arguments :
3852 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3853 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3854 default value is 3.
3855
3856 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3857 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3858 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3859
3860 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3861 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3862
3863 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3864 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3865
3866 See also : "option redispatch"
3867
3868
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003869rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003870 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3871 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3872 no | yes | yes | yes
3873 Arguments :
3874 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3875 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003876 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003877
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003878 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3879 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3880
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003881 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3882 the last header of an HTTP response.
3883
3884 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3885 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3886 responses.
3887
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003888 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3889 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003890
3891
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003892rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3893rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003894 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3895 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3896 no | yes | yes | yes
3897 Arguments :
3898 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3899 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3900 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3901 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3902 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3903 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3904 ignores case.
3905
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003906 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3907 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3908
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003909 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
3910 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3911 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
3912 client.
3913
3914 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3915 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3916 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3917
3918 Example :
3919 # remove the Server header from responses
3920 reqidel ^Server:.*
3921
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003922 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3923 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003924
3925
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003926rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3927rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003928 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
3929 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3930 no | yes | yes | yes
3931 Arguments :
3932 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3933 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3934 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3935 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3936 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3937 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
3938 ignores case.
3939
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003940 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3941 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3942
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003943 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3944 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
3945 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
3946 case-sensitive.
3947
3948 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003949 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
3950 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
3951 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003952
3953 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3954 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
3955
3956 Example :
3957 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
3958 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
3959
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003960 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
3961 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003962
3963
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003964rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3965rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003966 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
3967 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3968 no | yes | yes | yes
3969 Arguments :
3970 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3971 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3972 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3973 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3974 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3975 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
3976 ignores case.
3977
3978 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3979 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3980 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3981 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003982 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003983
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003984 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3985 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3986
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003987 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
3988 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
3989 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
3990
3991 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3992 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3993 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3994 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
3995 are not case-sensitive.
3996
3997 Example :
3998 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
3999 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4000
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004001 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4002 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004003
4004
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004005server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4006 Declare a server in a backend
4007 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4008 no | no | yes | yes
4009 Arguments :
4010 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4011 appear in logs and alerts.
4012
4013 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4014 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4015 start-up.
4016
4017 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4018 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4019 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4020 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4021 adding this value to the client's port.
4022
4023 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4024 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004025 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004026
4027 Examples :
4028 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4029 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4030
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004031 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004032
4033
4034source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004035source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004036 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4037 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4038 yes | no | yes | yes
4039 Arguments :
4040 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4041 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4042 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4043 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4044
4045 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4046 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004047 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4048 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4049 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004050
4051 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4052 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4053 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4054 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4055 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4056 <addr>.
4057
4058 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4059 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4060 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4061 port.
4062
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004063 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4064 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4065 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4066 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4067 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4068 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4069
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004070 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4071 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4072 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4073 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4074
4075 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4076 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4077 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4078 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4079 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4080 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4081
4082 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4083 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4084 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4085 there are two methods :
4086
4087 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4088 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4089 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4090 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4091 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4092 of the client ranges may be used.
4093
4094 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4095 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4096 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4097 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4098 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4099 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4100 same session.
4101
4102 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4103 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4104 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4105 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4106 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4107 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4108
4109 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4110 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4111 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004112 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004113
4114 Examples :
4115 backend private
4116 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4117 source 192.168.1.200
4118
4119 backend transparent_ssl1
4120 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4121 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4122
4123 backend transparent_ssl2
4124 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4125 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4126 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4127
4128 backend transparent_ssl3
4129 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4130 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4131 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4132
4133 backend transparent_smtp
4134 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4135 # with Tproxy version 4.
4136 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4137
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004138 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004139 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4140
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004141
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004142srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4143 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4144 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4145 yes | no | yes | yes
4146 Arguments :
4147 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4148 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4149 as explained at the top of this document.
4150
4151 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4152 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4153 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4154 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4155 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4156 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4157 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4158
4159 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4160 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4161 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4162 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4163 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004164 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004165 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004166 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004167
4168 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4169 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4170 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4171 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4172 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4173 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4174
4175 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4176 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4177
4178 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4179
4180
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004181stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4182 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4183 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4184 yes | no | yes | yes
4185 Arguments :
4186 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4187
4188 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4189
4190 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4191 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4192 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4193 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4194 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4195 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4196
4197 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4198 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4199 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4200 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4201
4202 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4203 report using "stats scope".
4204
4205 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4206 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4207 unobvious parameters.
4208
4209 Example :
4210 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4211 backend public_www
4212 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4213 stats enable
4214 stats hide-version
4215 stats scope .
4216 stats uri /admin?stats
4217 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4218 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4219 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4220
4221 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4222 backend private_monitoring
4223 stats enable
4224 stats uri /admin?stats
4225 stats refresh 5s
4226
4227 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4228
4229
4230stats enable
4231 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4232 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4233 yes | no | yes | yes
4234 Arguments : none
4235
4236 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4237 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4238 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4239 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4240 - stats auth : no authentication
4241 - stats scope : no restriction
4242
4243 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4244 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4245 unobvious parameters.
4246
4247 Example :
4248 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4249 backend public_www
4250 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4251 stats enable
4252 stats hide-version
4253 stats scope .
4254 stats uri /admin?stats
4255 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4256 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4257 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4258
4259 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4260 backend private_monitoring
4261 stats enable
4262 stats uri /admin?stats
4263 stats refresh 5s
4264
4265 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4266
4267
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004268stats show-node [ <name> ]
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004269 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4270 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4271 yes | no | yes | yes
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004272 Arguments:
4273 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4274 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004275
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004276 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4277 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4278 provided for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004279
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004280 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4281 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4282 unobvious parameters.
4283
4284 Example:
4285 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4286 backend private_monitoring
4287 stats enable
4288 stats show-node Europe-1
4289 stats uri /admin?stats
4290 stats refresh 5s
4291
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004292 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4293 section.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004294
4295
4296stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4297 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4298 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4299 yes | no | yes | yes
4300
4301 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4302 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4303
4304 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4305 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004306
4307 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4308 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4309 unobvious parameters.
4310
4311 Example :
4312 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4313 backend private_monitoring
4314 stats enable
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004315 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004316 stats uri /admin?stats
4317 stats refresh 5s
4318
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004319 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4320 global section.
4321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004322
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004323stats show-legends
4324 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4325 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4326 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4327 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4328 - IP (socket, server)
4329 - cookie (backend, server)
4330
4331 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4332 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4333 unobvious parameters.
4334
4335 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004336
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004337
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004338stats realm <realm>
4339 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4340 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4341 yes | no | yes | yes
4342 Arguments :
4343 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4344 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4345 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4346
4347 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4348 using a backslash ('\').
4349
4350 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4351 only related to authentication.
4352
4353 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4354 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4355 unobvious parameters.
4356
4357 Example :
4358 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4359 backend public_www
4360 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4361 stats enable
4362 stats hide-version
4363 stats scope .
4364 stats uri /admin?stats
4365 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4366 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4367 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4368
4369 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4370 backend private_monitoring
4371 stats enable
4372 stats uri /admin?stats
4373 stats refresh 5s
4374
4375 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4376
4377
4378stats refresh <delay>
4379 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4380 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4381 yes | no | yes | yes
4382 Arguments :
4383 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4384 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4385 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4386 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4387 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4388 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4389
4390 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4391 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4392 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4393 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4394
4395 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4396 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4397 unobvious parameters.
4398
4399 Example :
4400 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4401 backend public_www
4402 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4403 stats enable
4404 stats hide-version
4405 stats scope .
4406 stats uri /admin?stats
4407 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4408 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4409 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4410
4411 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4412 backend private_monitoring
4413 stats enable
4414 stats uri /admin?stats
4415 stats refresh 5s
4416
4417 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4418
4419
4420stats scope { <name> | "." }
4421 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4422 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4423 yes | no | yes | yes
4424 Arguments :
4425 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4426 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4427 section in which the statement appears.
4428
4429 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4430 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4431 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4432 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4433 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4434 exists.
4435
4436 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4437 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4438 unobvious parameters.
4439
4440 Example :
4441 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4442 backend public_www
4443 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4444 stats enable
4445 stats hide-version
4446 stats scope .
4447 stats uri /admin?stats
4448 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4449 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4450 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4451
4452 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4453 backend private_monitoring
4454 stats enable
4455 stats uri /admin?stats
4456 stats refresh 5s
4457
4458 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4459
4460
4461stats uri <prefix>
4462 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4463 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4464 yes | no | yes | yes
4465 Arguments :
4466 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4467 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4468 query string.
4469
4470 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4471 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4472 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4473 possible to reach it in the application.
4474
4475 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004476 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004477 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4478 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4479 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4480 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4481
4482 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4483 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4484 an address or a port to statistics only.
4485
4486 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4487 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4488 unobvious parameters.
4489
4490 Example :
4491 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4492 backend public_www
4493 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4494 stats enable
4495 stats hide-version
4496 stats scope .
4497 stats uri /admin?stats
4498 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4499 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4500 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4501
4502 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4503 backend private_monitoring
4504 stats enable
4505 stats uri /admin?stats
4506 stats refresh 5s
4507
4508 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4509
4510
4511stats hide-version
4512 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
4513 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4514 yes | no | yes | yes
4515 Arguments : none
4516
4517 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4518 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4519 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4520 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4521 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4522 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
4523
4524 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4525 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4526 unobvious parameters.
4527
4528 Example :
4529 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4530 backend public_www
4531 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4532 stats enable
4533 stats hide-version
4534 stats scope .
4535 stats uri /admin?stats
4536 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4537 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4538 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4539
4540 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4541 backend private_monitoring
4542 stats enable
4543 stats uri /admin?stats
4544 stats refresh 5s
4545
4546 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4547
4548
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004549stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4550 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
4551 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4552 no | no | yes | yes
4553
4554 Arguments :
4555 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4556 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4557 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4558 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4559
4560 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4561 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4562 the "stick-table" statement.
4563
4564 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4565 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4566 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4567 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4568 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4569
4570 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4571 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4572 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4573 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4574 transformation rules.
4575
4576 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4577 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4578 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4579 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4580 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4581 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4582 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4583
4584 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4585 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4586 ACL based conditions.
4587
4588 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4589 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4590 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4591 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4592
4593 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4594 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4595 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4596 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4597
4598 Example :
4599 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4600 # last 30 minutes
4601 backend pop
4602 mode tcp
4603 balance roundrobin
4604 stick store-request src
4605 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4606 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4607 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4608
4609 backend smtp
4610 mode tcp
4611 balance roundrobin
4612 stick match src table pop
4613 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4614 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4615
4616 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4617 extraction.
4618
4619
4620stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4621 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4622 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4623 no | no | yes | yes
4624
4625 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4626 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4627 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4628 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4629
4630 Examples :
4631 # The following form ...
4632 stick or src table pop if !localhost
4633
4634 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4635 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4636 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4637
4638
4639 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4640 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4641 backend http
4642 mode http
4643 balance roundrobin
4644 stick on src table https
4645 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4646 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4647 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4648
4649 backend https
4650 mode tcp
4651 balance roundrobin
4652 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4653 stick on src
4654 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4655 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4656
4657 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4658
4659
4660stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4661 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4662 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4663 no | no | yes | yes
4664
4665 Arguments :
4666 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4667 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4668 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4669 server is selected.
4670
4671 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4672 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4673 the "stick-table" statement.
4674
4675 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4676 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4677 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4678 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4679 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4680 address.
4681
4682 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4683 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4684 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4685 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4686 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4687 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4688 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4689 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4690 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4691 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4692
4693 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4694 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4695 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4696 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4697 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4698 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4699 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4700
4701 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4702 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4703 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4704 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4705
4706 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4707 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4708 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4709 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4710 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4711 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4712 another protocol or access method.
4713
4714 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4715 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4716 the request.
4717
4718 Example :
4719 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4720 # last 30 minutes
4721 backend pop
4722 mode tcp
4723 balance roundrobin
4724 stick store-request src
4725 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4726 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4727 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4728
4729 backend smtp
4730 mode tcp
4731 balance roundrobin
4732 stick match src table pop
4733 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4734 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4735
4736 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4737 extraction.
4738
4739
4740stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4741 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4742 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4743 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4744 no | no | yes | yes
4745
4746 Arguments :
4747 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4748 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4749 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4750 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4751
4752 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4753 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4754 instance.
4755
4756 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4757 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4758 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4759 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4760 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4761 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4762 to 31 characters.
4763
4764 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4765 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4766 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4767 increase.
4768
4769 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
4770 value directly impats memory usage. Count approximately 50 bytes
4771 per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size supports
4772 suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
4773
4774 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4775 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4776 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4777 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4778 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4779 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4780 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4781 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4782 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4783 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4784 parameter (see below).
4785
4786 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4787 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4788 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4789 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4790 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4791 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4792 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4793 if not expiration delay is specified.
4794
4795 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4796 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4797 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4798 reference it.
4799
4800 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4801 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4802 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4803 as an exclusive stickiness.
4804
4805 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4806 about time format.
4807
4808
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004809tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4810 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4811 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4812 no | yes | yes | no
4813
4814 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4815 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4816 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4817 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4818 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4819 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4820 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4821 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4822
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004823 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004824 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4825
4826 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4827 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4828 "reject" statement.
4829
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004830 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004831
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004832 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004833
4834
4835tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4836 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4837 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4838 no | yes | yes | no
4839
4840 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4841 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4842 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4843 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4844 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4845 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4846 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4847 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4848
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004849 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004850 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4851
4852 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4853 "accept".
4854
4855 Example:
4856 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4857 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4858 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4859 tcp-request reject if content_present
4860
4861 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4862 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4863 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4864 tcp-request accept if content_present
4865 tcp-request reject
4866
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004867 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004868
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004869 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004870
4871
4872tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4873 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4874 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4875 no | yes | yes | no
4876 Arguments :
4877 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4878 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4879 as explained at the top of this document.
4880
4881 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4882 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4883 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4884 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4885 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4886
4887 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4888 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004889 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004890 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004891 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4892 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4893 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4894 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004895
4896 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4897 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4898 it pass through unaffected.
4899
4900 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4901 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4902 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004903 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004904 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
4905 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
4906 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
4907
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004908 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004909 "timeout client".
4910
4911
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004912timeout check <timeout>
4913 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
4914 established.
4915
4916 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4917 yes | no | yes | yes
4918 Arguments:
4919 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4920 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4921 as explained at the top of this document.
4922
4923 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
4924 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
4925 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
4926 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
4927 Of course it is better to use "check queue" and "check tarpit" instead of
4928 long "timeout connect".
4929
4930 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
4931 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
4932
4933 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
4934 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01004935 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004936
4937 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4938 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4939 forget about it.
4940
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01004941 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
4942 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004943
4944
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004945timeout client <timeout>
4946timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4947 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
4948 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4949 yes | yes | yes | no
4950 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004951 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004952 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4953 as explained at the top of this document.
4954
4955 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
4956 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4957 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
4958 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
4959 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
4960 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
4961 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
4962 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004963 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004964 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
4965 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
4966
4967 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
4968 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4969 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4970 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4971 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4972 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4973
4974 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
4975 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
4976 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
4977
4978 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
4979
4980
4981timeout connect <timeout>
4982timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4983 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
4984 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4985 yes | no | yes | yes
4986 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004987 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004988 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4989 as explained at the top of this document.
4990
4991 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004992 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004993 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004994 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004995 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
4996 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004997
4998 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4999 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5000 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5001 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5002 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5003 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5004
5005 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5006 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5007 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5008
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005009 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5010 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005011
5012
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005013timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5014 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5015 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5016 yes | yes | yes | yes
5017 Arguments :
5018 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5019 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5020 as explained at the top of this document.
5021
5022 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5023 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5024 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5025 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5026 once the request has started to present itself.
5027
5028 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5029 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5030 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5031 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5032 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5033
5034 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5035 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5036 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5037 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5038
5039 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5040 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5041 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5042 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5043 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5044 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5045
5046 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5047 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5048 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5049 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5050
5051 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5052
5053
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005054timeout http-request <timeout>
5055 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5056 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005057 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005058 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005059 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005060 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5061 as explained at the top of this document.
5062
5063 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5064 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5065 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5066 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5067 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5068 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5069 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5070 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5071
5072 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5073 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005074 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5075 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005076
5077 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5078 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5079 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5080 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5081 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5082
5083 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005084 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5085 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5086 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005087
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005088 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005089
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005090
5091timeout queue <timeout>
5092 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5093 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5094 yes | no | yes | yes
5095 Arguments :
5096 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5097 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5098 as explained at the top of this document.
5099
5100 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5101 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5102 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5103 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5104 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5105
5106 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5107 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5108 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5109 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5110
5111 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5112
5113
5114timeout server <timeout>
5115timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5116 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5117 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5118 yes | no | yes | yes
5119 Arguments :
5120 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5121 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5122 as explained at the top of this document.
5123
5124 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5125 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5126 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5127 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5128 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5129 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5130 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5131
5132 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5133 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5134 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5135 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5136 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005137 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005138 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005139 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005140
5141 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5142 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5143 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5144 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5145 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5146 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5147
5148 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5149 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5150 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5151
5152 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5153
5154
5155timeout tarpit <timeout>
5156 Set the duration for which tapitted connections will be maintained
5157 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5158 yes | yes | yes | yes
5159 Arguments :
5160 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5161 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5162 as explained at the top of this document.
5163
5164 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5165 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5166 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5167
5168 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5169 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5170 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5171 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005172 with no "timeout tapit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005173
5174 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5175
5176
5177transparent (deprecated)
5178 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5179 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005180 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005181 Arguments : none
5182
5183 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5184 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5185 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5186 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5187 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5188 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5189 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5190 appropriate server.
5191
5192 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5193
5194 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5195 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5196
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005197 See also: "option transparent"
5198
5199
5200use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5201use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005202 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005203 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5204 no | yes | yes | no
5205 Arguments :
5206 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5207
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005208 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005209
5210 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5211 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5212 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005213 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5214 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5215 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5216 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005217
5218 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5219 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5220 assign the backend.
5221
5222 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5223 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5224 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5225 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5226 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5227 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5228
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005229 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005230 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005231 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5232 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5233 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5234
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005235 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005236
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005237
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010052385. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005239-----------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005240
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005241The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5242which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5243arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5244settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5245after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5246Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5247address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005248
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005249 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005250 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005251
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005252The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005253
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005254addr <ipv4>
5255 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5256 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5257 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5258 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5259 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005260
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005261 Supported in default-server: No
5262
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005263backup
5264 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5265 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5266 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5267 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5268 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5269 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005270
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005271 Supported in default-server: No
5272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005273check
5274 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5275 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5276 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5277 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5278 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5279 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5280 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5281 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5282 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005283 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5284 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005285
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005286 Supported in default-server: No
5287
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005288cookie <value>
5289 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5290 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5291 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5292 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5293 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5294 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5295 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5296
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005297 Supported in default-server: No
5298
5299error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005300 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5301 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5302 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005303
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005304 Supported in default-server: Yes
5305
5306 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005307
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005308fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005309 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5310 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5311 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5312
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005313 Supported in default-server: Yes
5314
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005315id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005316 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5317 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5318 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005319
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005320 Supported in default-server: No
5321
5322inter <delay>
5323fastinter <delay>
5324downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005325 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5326 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5327 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5328 between checks depending on the server state :
5329
5330 Server state | Interval used
5331 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5332 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5333 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5334 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5335 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5336 or yet unchecked. |
5337 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5338 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5339 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005340
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005341 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5342 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5343 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5344 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5345 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5346 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5347 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5348 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5349 servers.
5350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005351 Supported in default-server: Yes
5352
5353maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005354 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5355 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5356 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5357 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5358 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5359 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5360 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5361 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5362
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005363 Supported in default-server: Yes
5364
5365maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005366 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5367 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5368 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5369 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5370 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5371 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5372 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5373
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005374 Supported in default-server: Yes
5375
5376minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005377 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5378 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5379 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5380 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5381 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5382 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005383 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005384 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005385
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005386 Supported in default-server: Yes
5387
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005388observe <mode>
5389 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5390 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5391 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5392 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5393 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5394 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5395 headers, a timeout, etc.
5396
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005397 Supported in default-server: No
5398
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005399 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5400
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005401on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005402 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5403 Currently, four modes are available:
5404 - fastinter: force fastinter
5405 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5406 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5407 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5408 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5409
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005410 Supported in default-server: Yes
5411
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005412 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5413
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005414port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005415 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5416 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5417 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5418 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5419 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5420 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5421
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005422 Supported in default-server: Yes
5423
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005424redir <prefix>
5425 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5426 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5427 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5428 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5429 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5430 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5431 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5432 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005433 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005434 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5435 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5436 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5437 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5438 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5439
5440 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5441
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005442 Supported in default-server: No
5443
5444rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005445 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5446 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5447 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5448
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005449 Supported in default-server: Yes
5450
5451slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005452 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5453 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5454 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5455 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5456 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5457 parameters :
5458
5459 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5460 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5461
5462 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5463 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5464 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5465 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5466
5467 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5468 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5469 seen as failed.
5470
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005471 Supported in default-server: Yes
5472
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005473source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
5474source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005475 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5476 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5477 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5478 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5479
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005480 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5481 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5482 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5483 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5484 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5485 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5486 server.
5487
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005488 Supported in default-server: No
5489
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005490track [<proxy>/]<server>
5491 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5492 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5493 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5494 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5495 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5496
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005497 Supported in default-server: No
5498
5499weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005500 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5501 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5502 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005503 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5504 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5505 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5506 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5507 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5508 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005509
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005510 Supported in default-server: Yes
5511
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005512
55136. HTTP header manipulation
5514---------------------------
5515
5516In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5517response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5518request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5519which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5520against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5521to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5522passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5523headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5524never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5525
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005526There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5527(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5528rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5529messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5530in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005531happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005532add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5533normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5534
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005535This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5536in section 4.2 :
5537
5538 - reqadd <string>
5539 - reqallow <search>
5540 - reqiallow <search>
5541 - reqdel <search>
5542 - reqidel <search>
5543 - reqdeny <search>
5544 - reqideny <search>
5545 - reqpass <search>
5546 - reqipass <search>
5547 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5548 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5549 - reqtarpit <search>
5550 - reqitarpit <search>
5551 - rspadd <string>
5552 - rspdel <search>
5553 - rspidel <search>
5554 - rspdeny <search>
5555 - rspideny <search>
5556 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5557 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5558
5559With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5560is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5561parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5562prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5563Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5564
5565 \t for a tab
5566 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5567 \n for a new line (LF)
5568 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5569 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5570 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5571 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5572 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5573
5574The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5575portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5576above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5577regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
55789 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5579is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5580
5581The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5582after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5583
5584Notes related to these keywords :
5585---------------------------------
5586 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5587 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5588 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5589
5590 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5591 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5592 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5593
5594 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5595 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5596 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5597 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5598 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5599
5600 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5601 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5602 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5603 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5604 useless headers before adding new ones.
5605
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005606 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005607 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5608
5609 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5610 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5611 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5612
5613 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5614 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005615 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005616
5617
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010056187. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5619------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005620
5621The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5622content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5623from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5624simple :
5625
5626 - define test criteria with sets of values
5627 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5628
5629The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5630
5631In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5632
5633 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5634
5635This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5636Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5637and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5638an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5639of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5640
5641ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5642'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5643which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5644
5645There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5646performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5647
5648The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5649
5650 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005651 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5652
5653Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005654
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005655 - integers or integer ranges
5656 - strings
5657 - regular expressions
5658 - IP addresses and networks
5659
5660
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020056617.1. Matching integers
5662----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005663
5664Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5665that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5666expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5667may be omitted.
5668
5669For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5670unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5671representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5672
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005673As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5674two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5675instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5676ranges and operators.
5677
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005678For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005679operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5680Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5681of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005682
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005683Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005684
5685 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5686 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5687 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5688 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5689 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5690
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005691For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005692
5693 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5694
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005695This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5696
5697 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5698
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005699
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057007.2. Matching strings
5701---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005702
5703String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5704exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5705characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5706string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5707to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005708before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005709
5710
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057117.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5712-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005713
5714Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5715they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5716possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5717passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5718the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005719the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5720match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005721
5722
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057237.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5724----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005725
5726IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5727netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5728within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005729host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005730difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5731at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5732does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5733parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005734
5735
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057367.5. Available matching criteria
5737--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005738
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057397.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5740------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005741
5742A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5743analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5744addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5745
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005746always_false
5747 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5748 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5749
5750always_true
5751 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5752 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5753
5754src <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005755 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005756 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5757 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5758
5759src_port <integer>
5760 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
5761
5762dst <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005763 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005764 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
5765
5766dst_port <integer>
5767 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5768 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5769
5770dst_conn <integer>
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005771 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005772 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005773 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005774 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5775 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5776 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5777
5778fe_conn <integer>
5779fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5780 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5781 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5782 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5783 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5784 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5785 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5786 criteria.
5787
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005788fe_id <integer>
5789 Applies to the fronted's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
5790 frontend it was called.
5791
5792so_id <integer>
5793 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
5794
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005795be_conn <integer>
5796be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5797 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5798 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5799 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5800 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5801 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005802
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005803nbsrv <integer>
5804nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5805 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5806 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5807 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5808 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5809 "monitor fail".
5810
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005811connslots <integer>
5812connslots(backend) <integer>
5813 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005814 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005815 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5816
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005817 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5818 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005819
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005820 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005821 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5822 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5823 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5824 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5825 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005826 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005827
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005828 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5829 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5830 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5831 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005832
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005833queue <integer>
5834queue(frontend) <integer>
5835 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5836 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5837 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5838 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5839 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5840 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5841 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5842
5843avg_queue <integer>
5844avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5845 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5846 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5847 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5848 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5849 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5850 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5851 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5852 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5853 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5854 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5855 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5856
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005857fe_sess_rate <integer>
5858fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5859 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5860 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5861 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5862 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5863 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5864 the rate to go down below the limit.
5865
5866 Example :
5867 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5868 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5869 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5870 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5871 frontend mail
5872 bind :25
5873 mode tcp
5874 maxconn 100
5875 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5876 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5877 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5878 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005879
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005880be_sess_rate <integer>
5881be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5882 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5883 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5884 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005885 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005886 sucking of an online dictionary).
5887
5888 Example :
5889 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5890 backend dynamic
5891 mode http
5892 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5893 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
5894
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005895
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058967.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
5897-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005898
5899A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
5900during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
5901through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
5902for more detailed information on the subject.
5903
5904req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005905 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005906 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
5907 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
5908 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
5909 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
5910 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
5911 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
5912
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005913req_proto_http
5914 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
5915 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005916 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005917 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
5918 using TCP request content inspection rules.
5919
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005920req_rdp_cookie <string>
5921req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
5922 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
5923 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
5924 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
5925 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
5926 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
5927 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
5928 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
5929 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
5930
5931req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
5932req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
5933 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
5934 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
5935 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
5936 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
5937 cookies.
5938
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005939req_ssl_ver <decimal>
5940 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
5941 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
5942 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
5943 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
5944 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
5945 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
5946 with TCP request content inspection.
5947
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02005948wait_end
5949 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
5950 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
5951 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
5952 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
5953 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
5954 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
5955 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
5956 inspection.
5957
5958 Examples :
5959 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
5960 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
5961 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
5962
5963 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
5964 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
5965 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
5966 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
5967 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
5968 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
5969 tcp-request content reject
5970
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005971
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059727.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
5973--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005974
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005975A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005976application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
5977read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
5978than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
5979
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005980method <string>
5981 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
5982 already check for most common methods.
5983
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01005984status <integer>
5985 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
5986 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
5987 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
5988
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005989req_ver <string>
5990 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
5991 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
5992
5993path <string>
5994 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
5995 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
5996 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
5997
5998path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005999 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6000 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006001
6002path_end <string>
6003 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6004 control file name extension.
6005
6006path_sub <string>
6007 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6008 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6009 "path_dir".
6010
6011path_dir <string>
6012 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6013 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6014 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6015 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6016
6017path_dom <string>
6018 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6019 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6020 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6021
6022path_reg <regex>
6023 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6024 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6025 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6026
6027url <string>
6028 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6029 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6030
6031url_beg <string>
6032 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6033 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6034
6035url_end <string>
6036 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6037 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
6038
6039url_sub <string>
6040 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6041 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
6042
6043url_dir <string>
6044 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6045 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6046 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6047 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6048
6049url_dom <string>
6050 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6051 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6052 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6053
6054url_reg <regex>
6055 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6056 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6057 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
6058
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006059url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006060 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6061 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006062 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006063
6064url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006065 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6066 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006067 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006068 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006069
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006070hdr <string>
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006071hdr(header) <string>
6072 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6073 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006074 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6075 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006076 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006077
6078 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006079 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006080 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6081
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006082 hdr(Connection) -i close
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006083
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006084hdr_beg <string>
6085hdr_beg(header) <string>
6086 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006087 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6088 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006089
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006090hdr_end <string>
6091hdr_end(header) <string>
6092 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006093 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6094 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006095
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006096hdr_sub <string>
6097hdr_sub(header) <string>
6098 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006099 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6100 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006101
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006102hdr_dir <string>
6103hdr_dir(header) <string>
6104 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6105 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6106 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006107 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6108 headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006109
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006110hdr_dom <string>
6111hdr_dom(header) <string>
6112 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6113 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6114 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006115 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6116 server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006117
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006118hdr_reg <regex>
6119hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6120 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6121 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6122 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006123 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6124 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006125
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006126hdr_val <integer>
6127hdr_val(header) <integer>
6128 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6129 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6130 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006131 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006132
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006133hdr_cnt <integer>
6134hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6135 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6136 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6137 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6138 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006139 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006140 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6141 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic8b16fc2008-02-18 01:26:35 +01006142
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006143hdr_ip <ip_address>
6144hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6145 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6146 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006147 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6148 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006149
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006150
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061517.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6152---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006153
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006154Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6155every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6156order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6157only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006158
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006159ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6160---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
6161TRUE always_true always match
6162FALSE always_false never match
6163LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006164HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006165HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6166HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
6167METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6168METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6169METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6170METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6171METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6172METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
6173HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006174HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006175HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6176HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006177RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006178REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
6179WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6180---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006181
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006182
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061837.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6184----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006185
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006186Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6187combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006188
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006189 - AND (implicit)
6190 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6191 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006192
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006193A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006194
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006195 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006196
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006197Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6198indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006199
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006200For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6201"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6202requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6203is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006204
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006205 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6206 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6207 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6208 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006209
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006210To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6211and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006212
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006213 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6214 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6215 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6216 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006217
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006218 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6219 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6220 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6221 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006222
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006223It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6224expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6225be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6226the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6227
6228 The following rule :
6229
6230 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6231 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6232
6233 Can also be written that way :
6234
6235 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6236
6237It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6238to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6239simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6240sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6241good use is the following :
6242
6243 With named ACLs :
6244
6245 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6246 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6247 monitor fail if site_dead
6248
6249 With anonymous ACLs :
6250
6251 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6252
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006253See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006254
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006255
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010062567.8. Pattern extraction
6257-----------------------
6258
6259The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6260response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6261for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6262
6263All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6264"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6265begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6266arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6267much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6268equivalent used in ACLs.
6269
6270The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6271
6272 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6273 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6274
6275 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6276 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6277 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6278 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6279
6280 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6281 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6282 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6283 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6284 type integer and only works with such tables.
6285
6286
6287The currently available list of transformations include :
6288
6289 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6290 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6291 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6292
6293 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6294 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6295 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6296
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006297 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6298 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6299 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6300 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6301 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6302
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006303
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063048. Logging
6305----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006306
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006307One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6308provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6309very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6310provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6311state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006312to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006313headers.
6314
6315In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6316about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6317send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6318
6319 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6320 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6321 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6322 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6323 at the termination.
6324
6325The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6326allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6327as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6328while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6329real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6330delay.
6331
6332
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063338.1. Log levels
6334---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006335
6336TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6337source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6338HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6339in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6340particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006341syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006342facilities.
6343
6344
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063458.2. Log formats
6346----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006347
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006348HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006349and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6350the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6351formats are the following ones :
6352
6353 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6354 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6355 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6356 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6357 extents.
6358
6359 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6360 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6361 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6362 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6363 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6364
6365 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6366 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6367 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6368 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6369 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6370
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006371 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6372 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6373 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6374 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6375
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006376Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6377specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6378field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6379servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6380always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6381identifier.
6382
6383Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6384 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6385 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6386 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6387 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6388
6389
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063908.2.1. Default log format
6391-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006392
6393This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6394as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6395format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6396
6397 Example :
6398 listen www
6399 mode http
6400 log global
6401 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6402
6403 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6404 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6405 (www/HTTP)
6406
6407 Field Format Extract from the example above
6408 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6409 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6410 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6411 4 'to' to
6412 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6413 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6414
6415Detailed fields description :
6416 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6417 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6418 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6419 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6420 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6421 and processed the connection.
6422 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6423
6424It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6425will eventually disappear.
6426
6427
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064288.2.2. TCP log format
6429---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006430
6431The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6432is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6433information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6434counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6435emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6436environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6437the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6438sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006439specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6440not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6441fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6442marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006443
6444 Example :
6445 frontend fnt
6446 mode tcp
6447 option tcplog
6448 log global
6449 default_backend bck
6450
6451 backend bck
6452 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6453
6454 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6455 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6456 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6457
6458 Field Format Extract from the example above
6459 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6460 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6461 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6462 4 frontend_name fnt
6463 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6464 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6465 7 bytes_read* 212
6466 8 termination_state --
6467 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6468 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6469
6470Detailed fields description :
6471 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6472 connection to haproxy.
6473
6474 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6475
6476 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6477 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6478 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6479 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6480
6481 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6482 and processed the connection.
6483
6484 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6485 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6486 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6487 applications.
6488
6489 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6490 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6491 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6492 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6493 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6494
6495 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6496 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6497 See "Timers" below for more details.
6498
6499 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6500 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6501 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6502 "Timers" below for more details.
6503
6504 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6505 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6506 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6507 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6508 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6509 details.
6510
6511 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6512 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6513 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6514 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6515 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6516
6517 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6518 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6519 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6520 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6521 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6522 for more details.
6523
6524 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6525 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6526 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6527 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6528 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006529 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006530
6531 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6532 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6533 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6534 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6535 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6536 caused by a denial of service attack.
6537
6538 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6539 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6540 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6541 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6542 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6543 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6544 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6545 denial of service attack.
6546
6547 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6548 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6549 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6550 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6551 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6552 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6553 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6554 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6555 be processed than on other servers.
6556
6557 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6558 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6559 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6560 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6561 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6562 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6563 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6564 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6565 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6566 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6567 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6568 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6569 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6570
6571 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6572 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6573 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6574 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6575 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6576 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6577 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6578 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6579
6580 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6581 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6582 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6583 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6584 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6585 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6586 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6587 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6588 occurs.
6589
6590
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065918.2.3. HTTP log format
6592----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006593
6594The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6595is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6596the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6597are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6598emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6599generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6600"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6601which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006602frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6603is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006604
6605Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6606slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6607with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6608
6609 Example :
6610 frontend http-in
6611 mode http
6612 option httplog
6613 log global
6614 default_backend bck
6615
6616 backend static
6617 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6618
6619 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6620 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6621 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006622 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006623
6624 Field Format Extract from the example above
6625 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6626 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6627 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6628 4 frontend_name http-in
6629 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6630 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6631 7 status_code 200
6632 8 bytes_read* 2750
6633 9 captured_request_cookie -
6634 10 captured_response_cookie -
6635 11 termination_state ----
6636 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6637 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6638 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6639 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6640 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006641
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006642
6643Detailed fields description :
6644 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6645 connection to haproxy.
6646
6647 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6648
6649 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6650 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6651 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6652 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6653 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6654
6655 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6656 and processed the connection.
6657
6658 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6659 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6660 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6661
6662 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6663 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6664 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6665 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6666 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6667 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6668
6669 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6670 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6671 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6672 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6673 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6674 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6675
6676 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6677 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6678 See "Timers" below for more details.
6679
6680 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6681 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6682 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6683 below for more details.
6684
6685 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6686 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6687 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6688 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6689 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6690 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6691 for more details.
6692
6693 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6694 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6695 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6696 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6697 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6698 details.
6699
6700 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6701 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6702 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6703
6704 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6705 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6706 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6707 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6708 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6709 overflowing.
6710
6711 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6712 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6713 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6714 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6715 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6716 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6717 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6718 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6719
6720 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6721 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6722 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6723 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6724 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6725 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6726 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6727 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6728
6729 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6730 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6731 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6732 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6733 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6734 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6735 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6736
6737 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6738 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6739 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6740 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6741 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006742 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006743 system.
6744
6745 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6746 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6747 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6748 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6749 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6750 caused by a denial of service attack.
6751
6752 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6753 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6754 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6755 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6756 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6757 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6758 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6759 denial of service attack.
6760
6761 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6762 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6763 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6764 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6765 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6766 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6767 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6768 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6769 processed than on other servers.
6770
6771 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6772 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6773 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6774 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6775 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6776 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6777 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6778 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6779 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6780 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6781 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6782 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6783 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6784
6785 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6786 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6787 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6788 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6789 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6790 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6791 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6792 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6793
6794 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6795 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6796 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6797 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6798 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6799 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6800 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6801 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6802 occurs.
6803
6804 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6805 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6806 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6807 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6808 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6809 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6810 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6811 cookies" below for more details.
6812
6813 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6814 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6815 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6816 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6817 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6818 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6819 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6820 and cookies" below for more details.
6821
6822 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6823 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6824 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6825 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6826 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6827 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6828 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6829 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6830
6831
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068328.3. Advanced logging options
6833-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006834
6835Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6836just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6837options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6838for more information about their usage.
6839
6840
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068418.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6842------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006843
6844It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6845haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6846commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6847monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6848ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6849
6850 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6851 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6852 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6853 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6854
6855 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6856 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6857 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6858 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6859 such as other load-balancers.
6860
6861 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6862 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6863 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6864
6865
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068668.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6867----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006868
6869The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6870what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6871or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6872"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6873just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6874log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6875after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6876is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6877with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6878with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6879
6880
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068818.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6882------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006883
6884Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6885for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
6886"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
6887retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
6888raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
6889a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
6890file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
6891you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
6892"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
6893
6894
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068958.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
6896--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006897
6898Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
6899multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
6900them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
6901"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
6902logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
6903error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
6904and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
6905too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
6906useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
6907alternative.
6908
6909
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069108.4. Timing events
6911------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006912
6913Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
6914reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
6915the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
6916frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
6917mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
6918
6919 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
6920 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
6921 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
6922 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
6923 the client closes prematurely or times out.
6924
6925 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
6926 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
6927 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
6928 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
6929 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
6930
6931 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
6932 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
6933 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
6934 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
6935 connection never established.
6936
6937 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
6938 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
6939 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
6940 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
6941 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
6942 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
6943 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
6944 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
6945 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
6946 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
6947 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
6948
6949 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
6950 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
6951 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
6952 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
6953 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
6954
6955 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
6956
6957 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
6958 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
6959 negative.
6960
6961These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
6962protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
6963that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006964due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006965close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
6966session has been aborted on timeout.
6967
6968Most common cases :
6969
6970 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
6971 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
6972 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
6973 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
6974 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
6975 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
6976 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
6977 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
6978 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
6979 connections have been accepted at once.
6980
6981 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
6982 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
6983 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
6984 of ms on remote networks.
6985
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006986 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
6987 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
6988 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006989
6990 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
6991 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
6992 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
6993 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
6994 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
6995 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
6996 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
6997 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
6998 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
6999 to the server until another one is released.
7000
7001Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7002
7003 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7004 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7005 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7006
7007 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7008 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7009 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7010
7011 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7012 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7013 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7014 flags.
7015
7016 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7017 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7018 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7019 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7020 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7021 the client connection was maintained open.
7022
7023 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7024 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7025 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7026 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7027
7028
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070298.5. Session state at disconnection
7030-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007031
7032TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7033"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
70342-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7035each of which has a special meaning :
7036
7037 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7038 session to terminate :
7039
7040 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7041
7042 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7043 server explicitly refused it.
7044
7045 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7046 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7047 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7048 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7049 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7050 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7051
7052 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7053 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7054 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7055 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7056 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7057
7058 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7059 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7060 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7061 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7062 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7063
7064 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7065 send or receive data.
7066
7067 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7068 send or receive data.
7069
7070 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7071 with nothing left in the buffers.
7072
7073 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7074
7075 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7076 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7077
7078 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7079 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7080 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7081 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7082 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7083
7084 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7085 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7086
7087 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7088 server (HTTP only).
7089
7090 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7091
7092 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7093 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7094 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7095
7096 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7097 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7098 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7099
7100 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7101
7102 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7103 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7104
7105 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7106 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7107 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7108
7109 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7110 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7111 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7112
7113 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7114 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7115 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7116 another server.
7117
7118 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7119 server.
7120
7121 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7122
7123 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7124 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7125
7126 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7127
7128 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7129 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7130 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7131
7132 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7133
7134 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7135 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7136
7137 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7138
7139 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7140
7141The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7142happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7143helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7144starvation, attacks, etc...
7145
7146The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7147alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7148easier finding and understanding.
7149
7150 Flags Reason
7151
7152 -- Normal termination.
7153
7154 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7155 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7156 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7157 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7158
7159 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7160 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7161 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7162 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7163 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7164 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007165
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007166 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7167 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7168 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7169
7170 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7171 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7172 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7173
7174 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7175 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7176 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7177 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7178 the server takes too long to respond.
7179
7180 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7181 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7182 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7183 long a time to respond.
7184
7185 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7186 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7187 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7188 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7189 and the client.
7190
7191 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7192 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7193 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7194 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7195 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7196 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7197
7198 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7199 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007200 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7201 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7202 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7203 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007204
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007205 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007206 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7207 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7208 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7209 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7210 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7211
7212 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7213 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7214 503 or 504 here.
7215
7216 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7217 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7218 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7219 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7220 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7221
7222 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7223 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007224 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007225 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7226 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7227
7228 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7229 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7230 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7231 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7232 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7233 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7234 between haproxy and the server.
7235
7236 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7237 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7238 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7239 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7240 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7241 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7242 solution is to fix the application.
7243
7244 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7245 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7246 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7247 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7248 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7249 external attacks.
7250
7251 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7252 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7253 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7254 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7255 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7256
7257 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7258 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7259 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7260 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7261 containing unauthorized characters.
7262
7263 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7264 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7265 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7266 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7267
7268 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7269 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7270 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7271 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7272
7273 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7274 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7275 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7276 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7277
7278
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072798.6. Non-printable characters
7280-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007281
7282In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7283consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7284converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7285prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7286being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7287escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7288is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7289'}' when logging headers.
7290
7291Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7292issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7293containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7294
7295Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7296the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7297performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7298
7299
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073008.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7301---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007302
7303Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7304achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007305section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007306cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7307the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7308the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007309locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007310not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7311user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7312a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7313wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7314
7315 Examples :
7316 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7317 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7318
7319 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7320 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7321
7322
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073238.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7324---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007325
7326Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7327proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7328the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7329server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7330
7331Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7332response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007333section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007334
7335It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007336time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7337appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007338are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7339and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7340follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7341request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7342in the logs.
7343
7344 Example :
7345 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7346 listen proxy-out
7347 mode http
7348 option httplog
7349 option logasap
7350 log global
7351 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7352
7353 # log the name of the virtual server
7354 capture request header Host len 20
7355
7356 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7357 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7358
7359 # log the beginning of the referrer
7360 capture request header Referer len 20
7361
7362 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7363 capture response header Server len 20
7364
7365 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7366 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7367
7368 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7369 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7370
7371 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7372 capture response header Via len 20
7373
7374 # log the URL location during a redirection
7375 capture response header Location len 20
7376
7377 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7378 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7379 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7380 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7381 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7382
7383 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7384 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7385 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7386 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007387 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007388
7389 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7390 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7391 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7392 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7393 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007394 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007395
7396
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073978.9. Examples of logs
7398---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007399
7400These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7401them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7402reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7403
7404 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7405 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7406 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7407
7408 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7409 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7410
7411 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7412 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7413 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7414
7415 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7416 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7417
7418 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7419 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7420 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7421
7422 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007423 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007424 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7425 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7426
7427 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7428 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7429 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7430
7431 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7432 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7433 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7434 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7435 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7436 to return the 502 and not the server.
7437
7438 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007439 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007440
7441 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7442 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7443 Nothing was sent to any server.
7444
7445 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7446 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7447
7448 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7449 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7450 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7451 send a 408 return code to the client.
7452
7453 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7454 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7455
7456 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7457 5 seconds ("c----").
7458
7459 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7460 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007461 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007462
7463 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007464 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007465 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7466 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7467 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7468 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7469 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007470
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007471
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074729. Statistics and monitoring
7473----------------------------
7474
7475It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7476mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7477CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7478Unix socket.
7479
7480
74819.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007482---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007483
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007484The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7485page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7486
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007487 0. pxname: proxy name
7488 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7489 for server)
7490 2. qcur: current queued requests
7491 3. qmax: max queued requests
7492 4. scur: current sessions
7493 5. smax: max sessions
7494 6. slim: sessions limit
7495 7. stot: total sessions
7496 8. bin: bytes in
7497 9. bout: bytes out
7498 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007499 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007500 12. ereq: request errors
7501 13. econ: connection errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007502 14. eresp: response errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007503 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7504 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
7505 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/...)
7506 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7507 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7508 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7509 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7510 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7511 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7512 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7513 25. qlimit: queue limit
7514 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7515 27. iid: unique proxy id
7516 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7517 29. throttle: warm up status
7518 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7519 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007520 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007521 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7522 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7523 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007524 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
7525 UNK -> unknown
7526 INI -> initializing
7527 SOCKERR -> socket error
7528 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7529 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7530 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example "Connection refused"
7531 (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7532 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7533 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007534 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007535 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7536 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7537 disable-on-404
7538 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007539 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007540 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
7541 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7542 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007543 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7544 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7545 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7546 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7547 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7548 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007549
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075519.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007552-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007553
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007554The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007555must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7556is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7557a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7558risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7559followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7560given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7561then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7562to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007563
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007564It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7565on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7566own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007567
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007568help
7569 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7570 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007571
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007572prompt
7573 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7574 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7575 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7576 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7577 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7578 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7579 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7580 command.
7581
7582quit
7583 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007584
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007585show errors [<iid>]
7586 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7587 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007588 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7589 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7590 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007591
7592 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7593 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7594 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7595 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7596 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7597 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7598 are reported too.
7599
7600 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7601 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7602 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7603 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7604 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7605 code.
7606
7607 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7608 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7609 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7610 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7611 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7612 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7613 line.
7614
7615 Example :
7616 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7617 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7618 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7619 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7620
7621 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7622 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7623 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7624 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7625 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7626 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7627 00204+ minal\r\n
7628 00211 \r\n
7629
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007630 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007631 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7632 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7633 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7634 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7635 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7636 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007637
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007638show info
7639 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7640
7641show sess
7642 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007643 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7644 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7645
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007646
7647show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7648 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7649 possible to dump only selected items :
7650 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7651 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7652 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7653 for example:
7654 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7655 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7656 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7657
7658 Example :
7659 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7660 Name: HAProxy
7661 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7662 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7663 Nbproc: 1
7664 Process_num: 1
7665 (...)
7666
7667 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7668 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7669 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7670 (...)
7671 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7672
7673 $
7674
7675 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7676 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7677 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7678 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007679 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007680
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007681clear counters
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007682 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7683 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7684 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007685 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7686 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007687
7688clear counters all
7689 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007690 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7691 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7692
Cyril Bontécd19e512010-01-31 22:34:03 +01007693disable server <backend>/<server>
7694 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7695 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7696 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7697 during the maintenance.
7698
7699 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7700 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7701
7702 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7703 level "admin".
7704
7705enable server <backend>/<server>
7706 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7707 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7708
7709 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7710 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7711
7712 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7713 level "admin".
7714
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007715get weight <backend>/<server>
7716 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7717 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7718 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007719 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7720 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7721 dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007722
Willy Tarreau7aabd112010-01-26 10:59:06 +01007723set timeout cli <delay>
7724 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7725 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7726 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7727
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007728set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7729 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7730 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7731 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7732 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7733 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7734 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7735 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7736 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7737 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7738 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7739 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007740 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7741 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7742 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007743
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007744
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007745/*
7746 * Local variables:
7747 * fill-column: 79
7748 * End:
7749 */